دليل المستخدم

ManualsBrandsSamsung ManualsTVs & monitorsNC221

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

NC191

NC221

NC241

ﺭﺎﻌﺷﺇ ﻥﻭﺩ ﺮﻴﻴﻐﺘﻠﻟ ﺕﺎﻔﺻﺍﻮﻤﻟﺍ ﻊﻀﺨﺗﻭ ،ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟﺍ ﻑﻼﺘﺧﺎﺑ ﺮﻬﻈﻤﻟﺍ ﻭﺃ ﻥﻮﻠﻟﺍ ﻒﻠﺘﺨﻳ ﺪﻗ

ءﺍﺩﻷﺍ ﻦﻴﺴﺤﺘﻟ ﻖﺒﺴﻣ.

BN46-00327A-01

Summary of content (112 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪NC191‬‬ ‫‪NC221‬‬ ‫‪NC241‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 2
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 21‬ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‬ ‫‪ 25‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫
PAGE 3
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ "ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ" ﺃﻭ "ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ"‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﺒﻞ "ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ"‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ 33‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪LAN‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪WDM‬‬ ‫‪"PCoIP" 38‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪(OSD‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Options‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪Configuration‬‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪Diagnostics‬‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪Information‬‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪User Settings‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫
PAGE 4
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ Sharpness ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 76 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright 77 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 77 Coarse 78 Coarse ‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬ 78 Fine 79 Fine ‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬ 79 ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ SAMSUNG MAGIC Color 80 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 80 Red 81 Red ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 81 Green 82 Green ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 5.3.
PAGE 5
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪Display Time 90‬‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪Display Time‬‬ ‫‪Menu Transparency 91‬‬ ‫‪91‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪Menu Transparency‬‬ ‫‪Power Key 92‬‬ ‫‪92‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪Power Key‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪INFORMATION 93‬‬ ‫‪93‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪INFORMATION‬‬ ‫‪ 93‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪ Volume‬ﻣﻦ "ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ"‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫‪ 106‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‬ ‫‪ 112‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
PAGE 7
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫© ‪Samsung Electronics 2013‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ‪ Samsung Electronics‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻧﺸﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻦ ‪.Samsung Electronics‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.Microsoft Corporation‬‬ ‫‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ‪ Windows‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ّ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﺰﺍءﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻄﻬﱢﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺋﻂ( ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ Samsung‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪) .
PAGE 10
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻜﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ً‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Samsung‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻨﻖ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺘﺰ )ﺭﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ )ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ( ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻪ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻋﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ Samsung‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮّﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻏﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪GAS‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻇﻼﻝ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﺰﻡ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫)ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺤﺸﺮ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺪﻳﻬﻢ ﻭﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻣًﺎ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺄﺫﻧﻴﻚ‪.
PAGE 18
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪1.1.1‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺑﺄﺩﺍ ٍﺓ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﺮﻭﻓﻮﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﺮﻭﻓﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ً‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 19
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.1.2‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪.
PAGE 20
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺗﺠﺰﺋﺔ‪.
PAGE 21
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫‪1.2.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪SOURCE‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪VOL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ (OSD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 22
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ، Power Key ← SETUP&RESET‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Power Off‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪).Screen Off‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪ Power Key 7.5‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪(.Power Key‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Power Off‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ‪.Power Off‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪) .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪(.
PAGE 23
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‬ ‫‪1.2.2‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MIC‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO IN‬‬ ‫‪RGB IN‬‬ ‫‪LAN‬‬ ‫‪SERIAL‬‬ ‫‪DVI OUT‬‬ ‫‪POWER IN‬‬ ‫‪ON‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MIC‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO IN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪.
PAGE 24
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪POWER IN‬‬ ‫‪ON‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻫﻮ ‪ ،M‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 25
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪ 1.3.1‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻭﺟﻬﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ( ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 26
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.3.2‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪-3°(±2°) ~ 25°(±2°‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1.3.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 27
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ‬ ‫‪1.3.4‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ‬ ‫‪.‬ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪.‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 28
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﻗﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ VESA‬ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻗﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ .VESA‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﺮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 29
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪IP‬؟‬ ‫‪2.1‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )‪(LAN‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ RDP‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ (NC221, NC241)1080*1920, (NC191)1024*1280‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 30
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪2.2‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ُ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2.2.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪LAN‬‬ ‫‪LAN‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ LAN‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [LAN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) Cat 7‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ (*STP‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫*‪ :STP‬ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪2.2.
PAGE 31
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪2.2.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪MIC‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [MIC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2.2.4‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ "ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ" ﺃﻭ "ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ"‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ )ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [AUDIO OUT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫] [ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2.2.
PAGE 32
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪2.2.6‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ‬ ‫‪RGB IN‬‬ ‫‪DVI OUT‬‬ ‫‪DVI IN‬‬ ‫‪DVI OUT‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ]‪ [DVI OUT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ]‪ [DVI IN‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [RGB IN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ DVI‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ DVI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.D-SUB‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [DVI OUT‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬﻳﻦ ]‪ [DVI OUT‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺟﻴﻜﺘﻮﺭ‪).‬ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﺪﻗﺔ ﻫﻮ ‪ 1200 × 1920‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2.2.
PAGE 33
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪LAN‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ )‪(HUB‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪LAN‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﻭﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‪.
PAGE 34
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪2.3.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪WDM‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ WDM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻱ )‪ (VM‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻓﻚ ﺿﻐﻄﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ "‪ "TUSB3410 Device‬ﻓﻲ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ"‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪.Teradici firmware 4.0.
PAGE 35
"PCoIP" ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ 2 ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬Central Station 35
PAGE 36
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ "‪ "Browse‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻷﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ،Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ "‪."Install this driver software anyway‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ "‪.
PAGE 37
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ TUSB3410‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪.
PAGE 38
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫"‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪2.4.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪(OSD‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ (OSD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ PCoIP‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪.Connect‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪ Connect‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Options‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،Options‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Options‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪.Connect‬‬ ‫‪2.4.
PAGE 39
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪2.4.3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Options‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Options‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Options‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Configuration‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ؛ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Diagnostics‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Information‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.
PAGE 40
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪2.4.4‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪Configuration‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Configuration‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫َﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪ Configuration‬ﻛﺎﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Network‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪IPv6‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Label‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Discovery‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Session‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪OSD‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Display‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Reset‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ OK :‬ﻭ‪ Cancel‬ﻭ‪ .
PAGE 41
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Subnet Mask‬‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ‪ ،DHCP‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ ،DHCP‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ‪/IP‬ﺃﻗﻨﻌﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺤﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ؛ ﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Gateway‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻟﻠﻌﺒﱠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ‪ ،DHCP‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑًﺎ‪ .
PAGE 42
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪IPv6‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ IPv6‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ IPv6‬ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ PCoIP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ IPv6‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ‪ IPv6‬ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ‪.VMware View‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ :2-4‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪IPv6‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Enable IPv6‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ IPv6‬ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ PCoIP‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Link Local Address‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻞء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Gateway‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﱠﺎﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 43
‫‪2‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪Domain Name‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﻣﺜﻞ؛ "‪ ("domain.local‬ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ ،DHCPv6‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ‪.DHCPv6‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪FQDN‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ ،DHCPv6‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ‪DHCPv6‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Enable SLAAC‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ )‪ (SLAAC‬ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.
PAGE 44
‫‪2‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪PCoIP Device Name‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ‪ PCoIP Device Name‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺑﻤﻨﺢ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟـ "ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ"‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪pcoip-host-‬‬ ‫‪ MAC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ pcoip-portal-MAC‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ "ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪PCoIP Device Description‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ؛ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Generic Tag‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ‪ .
PAGE 45
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪Session‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Session‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ "ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ" ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ :2-7‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Session‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Connection Type‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ "ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ"‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ :2-8‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Connection Type‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪DNS Name or IP Address‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ DNS‬ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‪.
PAGE 46
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪Language Tab‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Language‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪ GUI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ "ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ" ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ :2-9‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Language‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 47
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪OSD‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ OSD‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ‪.On Screen Display‬‬ ‫ﻳﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ "‪ "OSD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ OSD‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ :2-10‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪OSD‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Screen-Saver Timeout‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪ .
PAGE 48
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ :2-11‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Display‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Enable display override‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺭﺛﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ EDID‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Windows‬ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،Windows 7‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ،EDID‬ﺳﻴ ّﺪﻋﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ EDID‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ‪.
PAGE 49
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪Reset Tab‬‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ flash‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Reset Parameters‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻹﺫﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺪء "ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ" ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪Reset :2-12‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Reset Parameters‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 50
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪2.4.5‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪Diagnostics‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Diagnostic‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Diagnostic‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Event Log‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Session‬‬ ‫‪Statistics‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪Processor‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Ping‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺯﺭ ‪ Close‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ‪.
PAGE 51
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪View event log message‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ‪ View event log messages‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺯﺭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Refresh‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Refresh‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Clear‬‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪Session Statistics‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Session Statistics‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ .
PAGE 52
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Bytes Sent‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Bytes Received‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Round Trip Latency‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪) PCoIP‬ﻣﺜﻞ؛ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ( ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ 1 -/+‬ﻡ ﺙ(‪.
PAGE 53
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪Ping‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Ping‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ .IP‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 3.2.
PAGE 54
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪2.4.6‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪Information‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Information‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ‪ VPD‬ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ (OSD‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Version‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪Version :2-17‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪VPD‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 55
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ‪Firmware Information‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪ PCoIP‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Firmware Version‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Firmware Build ID‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Firmware Build Date‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪PCoIP Processor Revision‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ ،PCoIP‬ﻋﻠﻤًﺎ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻳُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ )ﺏ( ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﺑـ ‪.1.
PAGE 56
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪2.4.7‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪User Settings‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ User Settings‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ" ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ‪ PCoIP‬ﻭﻃﺒﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ User Settings‬ﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪VMware View‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Mouse‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Keyboard‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Image‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Display Topology‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Touch Screen‬‬ ‫‪VMware View Tab‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ VMware View‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪.
PAGE 57
‫‪2‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪Warn if the connection may be insecure‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻴًﺎ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪ً zero client trust store‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Allow the unverifiable connection‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﻟﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪.
PAGE 58
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪Keyboard‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Keyboard‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ PCoIP‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫"ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ"‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪PCoIP Host Software for Windows User Guide‬‬ ‫)‪ (TER0810001‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 59
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪Image‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Image‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ .PCoIP‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻠﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﻟـ ‪ PCoIP‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ PCoIP‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻟـ ‪ ،VMware View‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ .PCoIP‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪VMware‬‬ ‫‪ View 4 to PCoIP Client WAN Network Guidelines‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ "ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ" ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 60
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪Display Topology‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Display Topology‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺩﻗﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ .PCoIP‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻃﺒﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ PCoIP‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ )‪ ،(VM‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 4.5‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪VMware‬‬ ‫‪ View‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻃﺒﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ PCoIP‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ PCoIP‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ً PCoIP host‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .
PAGE 61
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Horizontal‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ )ﺃ( ﻭ )ﺏ( ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ )ﺃ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ )ﺏ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Vertical‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ )ﺃ( ﻭ )ﺏ( ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ )ﺃ( ﻓﻮﻕ )ﺏ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Alignment‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺃ( ﻭ)ﺏ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﻤﺎ‪.
PAGE 62
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪Touch Screen‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Touch Screen‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪ Elo TouchSystems‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Touch Screen‬ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪Touch Screen :2-23‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Enable right click on hold‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﺘﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻣﻮﺍ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ٍ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.
PAGE 63
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪Password‬‬ ‫‪2.4.8‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Management Console‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Password‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ‪ً 20‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻓﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ PCoIP‬ﺑﻬﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﱠ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻄﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Password‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ PCoIP Management Console‬ﻟﻬﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪ GUI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪.
PAGE 64
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪Authorized Password Reset :2-25‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ PCoIP‬ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Teradici‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫)‪.(http://www.teradici.
PAGE 65
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪2.4.9‬‬ ‫‪Wake On LAN‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣُﻌﺪ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪.Wake on LAN‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺪﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪) .‬ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪(.
PAGE 66
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪2.4.10‬‬ ‫‪Wake On USB‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪ Wake On USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Wake on USB‬ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 67
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"PCoIP‬‬ ‫‪2.4.11‬‬ ‫‪OSD Logo Upload‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،OSD Logo Upload‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Teradici OSD‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ‪ IP‬ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﱠﻦ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ ،(Log In‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‪ .OSD Logo ← Upload‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪.OSD Logo Upload‬‬ ‫)ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪(.
PAGE 68
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪3.1.1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.
PAGE 69
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪3.2.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ُ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) D-SUB‬ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ(‬ ‫‪RGB IN‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ D-SUB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [RGB IN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 70
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪3.2.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪Windows Driver‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ "‪."Windows Driver‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ‪.
PAGE 71
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪3.2.3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ‪.
PAGE 72
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪3.2.4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻓﻲ "ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ" ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ‪ TFT-LCD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ← ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ← ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 73
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Windows 7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ← ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ← ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Windows 8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ← ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ← ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ← ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 74
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.1‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Brightness‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪).‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪ MAGICBright‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫‪4.1.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Brightness‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ"‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 75
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.2‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪Contrast‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪).‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ MAGICColor‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Full‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Intelligent‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ MAGICBright‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫‪4.2.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Contrast‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ"‪ .
PAGE 76
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪Sharpness‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺎ ًﻧﺎ‪).‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﻞ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ MAGICBright‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ MAGICColor‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Full‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Intelligent‬‬ ‫‪4.3.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Sharpness‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ"‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 77
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright‬‬ ‫‪4.4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣُﺜﻠﻰ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4.4.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ"‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Picture‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 78
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.5‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪Coarse‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Analog‬‬ ‫‪4.5.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪Coarse‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ"‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Picture‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Coarse‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 79
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.6‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪Fine‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ "Fine‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Analog‬‬ ‫‪4.6.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪Fine‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ"‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Picture‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Fine‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ‪ Fine‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 80
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ MAGICBright‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪Dynamic‬‬ ‫‪.Contrast‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Color‬‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،Samsung‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍ ًﻧﺎ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳُﻌﺪ ‪ MAGICColor‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪.MAGICAngle‬‬ ‫‪5.1.
PAGE 81
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪Red‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ MAGIC Color‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Full‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Intelligent‬‬ ‫‪5.2.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Red‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ"‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 82
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪Green‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫‪ MAGIC‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Full‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Intelligent‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪Color‬‬ ‫‪5.3.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Green‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ"‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 83
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪Blue‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫‪ MAGIC‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Full‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Intelligent‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪Color‬‬ ‫‪5.4.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Blue‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ"‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 84
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.5‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪Color Tone‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫‪ MAGIC‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Full‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Intelligent‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪Color‬‬ ‫‪5.5.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪Color Tone‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ"‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ COLOR‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Color Tone‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 85
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.6‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪Gamma‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )‪ (Gamma‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5.6.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Gamma‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ"‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ COLOR‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Gamma‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 86
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪H-Position & V-Position‬‬ ‫‪ :H-Position‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :V-Position‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Analog‬‬ ‫‪6.1.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪ H-Position‬ﻭ ‪V-Position‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ"‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 87
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position‬‬ ‫‪ :Menu H-Position‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Menu V-Position‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6.2.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪ Menu H-Position‬ﻭ ‪Menu V-Position‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ"‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 88
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪Reset‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7.1.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ)‪(Reset‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ"‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ SETUP&RESET‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Reset‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 89
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺮﺃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7.2.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪Language‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ"‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 90
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪Display Time‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ (OSD‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Display Time‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" ﺑﻌﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7.3.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪Display Time‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ"‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 91
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪Menu Transparency‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪7.4.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪Menu Transparency‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ"‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ SETUP&RESET‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Menu Transparency‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 92
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪Power Key‬‬ ‫‪7.5‬‬ ‫ُﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ‪.Power Off‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪Power Key‬‬ ‫‪7.5.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ"‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ SETUP&RESET‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Power Key‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 93
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪8.1‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪INFORMATION‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8.1.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪INFORMATION‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ"‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .INFORMATION‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪PICTURE‬‬ ‫‪COLOR‬‬ ‫‪Analog‬‬ ‫‪64.
PAGE 94
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪Natural Color‬‬ ‫‪9.1.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Natural Color‬؟‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺳﺢ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪" .‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ" ﻫﻮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung Electronics‬ﻟﺤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ .
PAGE 95
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪MultiScreen‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ MultiScreen‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ‪ VDI‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ ﻣﺰﻭﱠﺩ ﺑﺄﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ Windows‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻱ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﱠﺩ ﺑـ ‪ VMware View‬ﻭ‪Teradici Hostcard‬‬ ‫‪MultiScreen‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ MultiScreen‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9.2.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.
PAGE 96
‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ "‪ "MultiScreen‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ "‪ "Windows 2000‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫"ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ"‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 32‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 60‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪9.2.2‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪]/‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ "‪ "MultiScreen‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪/‬ﺣﺬﻑ[‪.
PAGE 97
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 10.1‬ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪Samsung‬‬ ‫‪10.1.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ ،Samsung‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪.Samsung‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.
PAGE 98
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫"ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪."Not Optimum Mode‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 3.2‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ"(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Coarse‬ﻭ‪.
PAGE 99
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 10.2‬ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Windows XP‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Windows ME/2000‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Windows Vista‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 100
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Windows XP‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﻭ ‪BIOS‬‬ ‫‪) SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Windows ME/2000‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﻭ ‪BIOS SETUP‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 101
‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 11.1‬ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪NC191‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪NC221‬‬ ‫‪ 19‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ 48.1 /‬ﻡ‬ ‫‪ 376.32‬ﻣﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎً( ×‬ ‫‪ 301.06‬ﻣﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺎً(‬ ‫‪ 21.5‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ 54.6 /‬ﻡ‬ ‫‪ 476.64‬ﻣﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎً( ×‬ ‫‪ 268.11‬ﻣﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺎً(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪ 80 ~ 31‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ 75 ~ 56‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 16.7‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 1024 × 1280‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪ 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1024 × 1280‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪ 75‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫‪ 1080 × 1920‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫‪ 135.
PAGE 102
‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 11.2‬ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ LED‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻤًﺎ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‪ .‬ﺟﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 103
‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 11.3‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) CDT‬ﻣﻮّﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 104
‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪NC221‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫)ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫)ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫)ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪/‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪MAC,640 x 480‬‬ ‫‪35.000‬‬ ‫‪66.667‬‬ ‫‪30.240‬‬ ‫‪-/-‬‬ ‫‪VESA,640 x 480‬‬ ‫‪31.469‬‬ ‫‪59.940‬‬ ‫‪25.175‬‬ ‫‪-/-‬‬ ‫‪VESA,640 x 480‬‬ ‫‪37.861‬‬ ‫‪72.809‬‬ ‫‪31.500‬‬ ‫‪-/-‬‬ ‫‪VESA,640 x 480‬‬ ‫‪37.500‬‬ ‫‪75.000‬‬ ‫‪31.500‬‬ ‫‪-/-‬‬ ‫‪IBM,720 x 400‬‬ ‫‪31.469‬‬ ‫‪70.087‬‬ ‫‪28.322‬‬ ‫‪+/-‬‬ ‫‪VESA,800 x 600‬‬ ‫‪35.
PAGE 105
‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫)ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫)ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫)ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪/‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪IBM, 720 x 400‬‬ ‫‪31.469‬‬ ‫‪70.087‬‬ ‫‪28.322‬‬ ‫‪+/-‬‬ ‫‪VESA, 800 x 600‬‬ ‫‪35.156‬‬ ‫‪56.250‬‬ ‫‪36.000‬‬ ‫‪+/+‬‬ ‫‪VESA, 800 x 600‬‬ ‫‪37.879‬‬ ‫‪60.317‬‬ ‫‪40.000‬‬ ‫‪+/+‬‬ ‫‪VESA, 800 x 600‬‬ ‫‪48.077‬‬ ‫‪72.188‬‬ ‫‪50.000‬‬ ‫‪+/+‬‬ ‫‪VESA, 800 x 600‬‬ ‫‪46.875‬‬ ‫‪75.000‬‬ ‫‪49.500‬‬ ‫‪+/+‬‬ ‫‪MAC, 832 x 624‬‬ ‫‪49.
PAGE 106
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‬ .‫ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺴﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬،‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻳﺔﺍﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬ NORTH AMERICA http://www.samsung.com 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) U.S.A http://www.samsung.com/ca (English) 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) CANADA 01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) MEXICO http://www.samsung.com/ca_fr (French) http://www.samsung.com LATIN AMERICA http://www.samsung.com 0800-333-3733 ARGENTINE http://www.samsung.com 800-10-7260 BOLIVIA http://www.
PAGE 107
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ LATIN AMERICA http://www.samsung.com 1-800-234-7267 JAMAICA http://www.samsung.com/latin (Spanish) http://www.samsung.com/latin_en (English) 00-1800-5077267 NICARAGUA http://www.samsung.com/latin (Spanish) http://www.samsung.com/latin_en (English) 800-7267 PANAMA http://www.samsung.com 98005420001 PARAGUAY http://www.samsung.com 0-800-777-08 (Only from landline) 336-8686 (From HHP & landline) PERU http://www.samsung.com 1-800-682-3180 PUERTO RICO http://www.samsung.
PAGE 108
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ EUROPE http://www.samsung.com 0180 5 SAMSUNG bzw. 0180 5 7267864* (*0,14 €/Min. aus dem dt. Festnetz, aus dem Mobilfunk max. 0,42 €/Min.) GERMANY http://www.samsung.com 80111-SAMSUNG (80111 726 7864) only from land line (+30) 210 6897691 from mobile and land line GREECE http://www.samsung.com 06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864) HUNGARY http://www.samsung.com 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) ITALIA http://www.samsung.com/lv 8000-7267 LATVIA http://www.samsung.com/lt 8-800-77777 LITHUANIA http://www.
PAGE 109
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ CIS http://www.samsung.com 0-800-05-555 ARMENIA http://www.samsung.com 088-55-55-555 AZERBAIJAN http://www.samsung.com 810-800-500-55-500 BELARUS http://www.samsung.com 0-800-555-555 GEORGIA http://www.samsung.com 8-10-800-500-55-500 (GSM: 7799) KAZAKHSTAN http://www.samsung.com 00-800-500-55-500 KYRGYZSTAN http://www.samsung.com 0-800-614-40 MOLDOVA http://www.samsung.com +7-800-555-55-55 MONGOLIA http://www.samsung.com 8-800-555-55-55 RUSSIA http://www.samsung.
PAGE 110
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ASIA PACIFIC http://www.samsung.com/ph 1-800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864) for PLDT 1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-7864) for Digitel 1-800-8-SAMSUNG (726-7864) for Globe 02-5805777 PHILIPPINES http://www.samsung.com 1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) SINGAPORE http://www.samsung.com 0800-329-999 0266-026-066 TAIWAN http://www.samsung.com/th 1800-29-3232 02-689-3232 THAILAND http://www.samsung.com 1 800 588 889 VIETNAM http://www.samsung.com/ae (English) http://www.samsung.
PAGE 111
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ AFRICA http://www.samsung.com 91-726-7864 ANGOLA http://www.samsung.com 0800-726-000 BOTSWANA http://www.samsung.com 7095- 0077 CAMEROON http://www.samsung.com 8000 0077 COTE D’ IVOIRE http://www.samsung.com 0800-10077 0302-200077 GHANA http://www.samsung.com 0800 545 545 KENYA http://www.samsung.com 8197267864 NAMIBIA http://www.samsung.com 0800-726-7864 NIGERIA http://www.samsung.com 800-00-0077 SENEGAL http://www.samsung.
PAGE 112
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪) OSD‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗُﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ (OSD‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗُﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Gamma‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Gamma‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Gamma‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪.